دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsDigital CameraD7200

Ar_01

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

SB5B01(1X)

6MB2731X-01

ﺀﺎﻨﺜﺘﺳﺎﺑ)

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﺋﺰﺟ ﻭﺃ

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﻠﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻦﻣ ﺎﻬﻠﻜﺷ ﻥﺎﻛ ﺎﻤﻬﻣ ﺔﺨﺴﻧ ﻱﺍ ﻞﻤﻋ ﺯﻮﺠﻳ ﻻ

ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻧ ﻦﻣ ﻲﻄﺧ ﺢﻳﺮﺼﺗ ﻥﻭﺩ (ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺓﺪﻗﺎﻨﻟﺍ ﺕﻻﺎﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺰﺟﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﺱﺎﺒﺘﻗﻻﺍ

.ﻦﺸﻳﺭﻮﺑﺭﻮﻛ

ﺓﺭﻮﻓﺎﻐﻨﺳ ﻲﻓ ﺔﻋﺎﺒﻄﻟﺍ ﺖﻤﺗ

Summary of content (416 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.
PAGE 2
‫‪D7200‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪N1406 :‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ pdf‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﺃﻭ ‪Adobe Acrobat‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ؛ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ؛ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪ii ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪x .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ‪xiv...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪xx ...........................................................................
PAGE 6
‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﺎﻥ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪62 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪64 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪65 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪66 ............................................................
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪105‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪105 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪107 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪109 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪111‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪114 ....................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪156‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪156 .....................................ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪160 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪160 ............................................................. WR-1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪160 .......................................WR-R10/WR-T10‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪161‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪161 ....................
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪229‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪229 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪229 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪231 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪232 ............................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪266‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪266 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪268 .......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪273 .......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪276 .................................‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪289 .............
PAGE 11
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪333 ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪333 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ(‪334 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪337 .......................................................................................................
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.
PAGE 15
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ • ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺬﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪AVC Patent Portfolio License‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (i‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪») AVC‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ («AVC‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (ii‬ﻓﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻳﻤﺎﺭﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮ ﹼﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .AVC‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻷﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .L.L.C ،MPEG LA‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪http://www.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺤﺮﻣﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮﻩ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻛﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻀﺎﺋﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﹸﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 24
xxii
PAGE 25
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪273 ،192 ،163 ................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪66 ،8 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪6 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪6 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪20 ...............................
PAGE 26
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪10 144 ،36 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪324 ،71 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪11 352...................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪12 23 ..............................‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪151 ،146 ،144 ............................. M/Y‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ )ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ(‪15 157.......................................................
PAGE 27
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪277 ،34 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪69 .............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪147 ،145 ......‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪285...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪288 ،285 ،167 ،55................................ Pv‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪288 ،284 ،76......................................... Fn‬‬ ‫‪) N-Mark‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪254............................. (NFC‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪28 ،22 ........
PAGE 28
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ 13 25 ،10 ...................‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) R‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ‪185 ،13 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ 14 70 ................................‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪285..........................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‪ 15 25 ...................‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪17 ،15 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 16 288 ،285 ،107 ،94..............................
PAGE 29
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ D‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺿﻮﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ D‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ (305 0) CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3 4 5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ S 1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪66 ...............................................‬‬ ‫‪ T 2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ‪66 ...............‬‬ ‫‪ U 3‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪66 .......................‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ J 4‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪66 ............................‬‬ ‫‪ E 5‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪69 ،66 .....................................
PAGE 33
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪56 ،53 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪26 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪56 ،54 ........................
PAGE 34
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪21 22‬‬ ‫‪15 16 17 18 19 20‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪27 28 29‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪11 12 13 14‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪44 ........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪130 ،44 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪33 ،25 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ"‪29 ..................
PAGE 35
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪23 56 ،53 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪24 56 ،54 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ(‪25 308 ،54 .....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪142...................................... (HDR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪27 140................................................ADL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪198.....................................
PAGE 36
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 1‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :D‬ﻋﺮﺽ )‪(266 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :C‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(268 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :1‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(273 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪(276 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :B‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(289 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :N‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪(294 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :O/m‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ؛ ‪(297 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ :2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ :4‬ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ :3‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) d‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ d‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 42
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 45
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )‪ .(q‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ )‪ (w‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )‪ .(e‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .OFF‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .(27 0) 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪.AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺟﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪.(321 0‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺎﻣﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 30‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫❚❚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 51
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .2‬ﺗﺨﺘﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ؛ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟـ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ (82 0) 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 52
‫❚❚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16GB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫)‪ .(q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫‪ A‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪ .S‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ S‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪16G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﺎﻥ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪(j‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪ .j‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ‪ i‬ﻭ ‪ j‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ"‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.j‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺻﺪﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﻃﻮﻟﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ (I‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪ A‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،i‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ .(M‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ؛ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺖ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.× 19‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ ،(267 0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ "ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ"‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.35-30‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) SCENE‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 66
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻃﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‪/‬ﺛﻠﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺃﺯﻫﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) EFFECTS‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺩﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 45‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 30p/1080×1920‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫)‪.(47 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ‪ g‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 71
‫❚❚ ‪ i‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(T) X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 73
‫❚❚ ‪ u‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﻧ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 74
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪7‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 4‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ )‪ :(52 0‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ :(53 0‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪ :P‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ )"ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ"(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ "ﺗﺠﻤﺪ"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫‪ :S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "v‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪(308 0) CPU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Pv‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ (S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ،(M‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "v‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .(58 0 ،%‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ "ﻓﺘﺢ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ"‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،(278 0 ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ EV 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ )‪ :(A‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (319 ،160 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ )‪.
PAGE 83
‫❚❚ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ " ﻓﺘﺢ" )‪.(A‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 84
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ "ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ" )‪.(%‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ،ML-L3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (ML-L3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ .(156 0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،ML-L3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫"ﻓﺘﺢ"‪ A/‬ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﺎﻥ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.U2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.U2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ U2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ .(280 ،67 0 ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (73 0‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ)‪ ، NEF (RAW‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪ .(80 0) NEF (RAW‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )‪.(tAA‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﻟﺤﻮﻟﻲ ‪ 42‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪(E‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪(q‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ )‪ .(w‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ )‪(MUP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) MUP‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪ .(319 0‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ML-L3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .156‬ﻧﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX a‬‬ ‫‪(18×12) 1.3× Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 15.6 × 23.5‬ﻣﻢ )ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪.(DX‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،12.5 × 18.8‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪.(67 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.
PAGE 98
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻘﺺ ‪ DX ×1.3‬ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ s‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪.DX ×1.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ‪DX ×1.3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 168‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .1‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 380‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﹴ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )‪.(74 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 100
‫❚❚ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪.(380 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫‪ NEF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺻﻮﺭ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪+ NEF (RAW) A‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪ + NEF (RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪(284 0 ،Fn‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪) Fn‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﻞ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 104
‫❚❚ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ < NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ #‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ $‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫‪:(73 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪33.9 × 50.8‬‬ ‫‪4000 × 6000‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪25.4 × 38.1‬‬ ‫‪3000 × 4496‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪16.9 × 25.3‬‬ ‫‪2000 × 2992‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪27.1 × 40.6‬‬ ‫‪3200 × 4800‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪20.3 × 30.5‬‬ ‫‪2400 × 3600‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫‪13.5 × 20.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ )‪ .(97 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ (89 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ )‪.(93 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ AF-F‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،AF-A‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﺄ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪89‬؛ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 111
‫• ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .89‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ AF-A‬ﻭ‪ AF-C‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﻵﺧﺮ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﻋﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺲ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻏﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ! ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ؛ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 113
‫• & ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .AF-S‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a5‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( < ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ .(277 0‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a6‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .(277 0 ،‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) a7‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(96 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 118
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ AF-A‬ﻭ‪) AF-C‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )‪ ،(q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪AE-L/AF-L A‬‬ ‫)‪ (w‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،AE-L/AF-L A‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 119
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ AF-S‬ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ AE-L/AF-L A‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻭﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )‪.(96 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ :AF‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ M‬ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫❚❚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 51‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ .
PAGE 123
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO 25600‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫‪ .EV 1/3‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.(271 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 125
‫❚❚ ‪ Hi‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ Hi/1‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Hi‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ Hi‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < (271 0) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ )‪ ،(271 0‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Hi‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ Hi‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﹴ‬ ‫‪ (S) W‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .
PAGE 126
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 127
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ(‪ .
PAGE 128
‫‪ A‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ :2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪CPU‬؛ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ ﹸﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪) M‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) Z‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(Q) Z‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(225 0‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .
PAGE 131
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ )‪ (105 0‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )‪.(105 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ؛ ‪(52 0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ ،SCENE‬ﻭ‪ %‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ )‪ .(105 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) EV -5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪) EV +5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .EV 1/3‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ،±0.0‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪SCENE‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ (%‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 136
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)‪ ،(274 ،269 0‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (114 0‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ .
PAGE 137
‫‪ A‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﺴﺒﻬﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ K 5500-5000‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ" ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪114‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.
PAGE 139
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫)‪-(A‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪114 0) (B‬؛ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،L‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .(129‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪) 0.
PAGE 140
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("E‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺩﺍﻓﺊ" ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺃﺑﺮﺩ" ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪N‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ ‪) I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ( ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 142
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﻀﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) M‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ 0‬ﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪-(G‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ )‪ ،(M‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )"‪ ("E‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 143
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫)‪-(A‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (B‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ؛‬ ‫)‪ .(116 0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .d-6‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 145
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-6‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 146
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 147
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ C ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ b a‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 149
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (r‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 150
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( < ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪.(279 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻬﺔ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(d-6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(S) W‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 152
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ )‪ ،(291 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 153
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫)‪ (d-1 - d-6‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Controls‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪ .
PAGE 155
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .
PAGE 156
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ )‪ (135 0‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (130 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 157
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 158
‫‪) "A" D‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ E‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) B&W‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.
PAGE 160
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 133‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪ C-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (C-9‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 161
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(T) X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ < Picture Control‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.
PAGE 162
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 163
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻ ﹰ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting D‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻻﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪(HDR‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪ (HDR‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪105 0‬؛ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ .
PAGE 166
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،HDR‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 6‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ HDR‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.HDR‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻴﻦ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪ l j‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫‪ l l‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪ k‬ﻭ‪ p‬ﻭ‪ n‬ﻭ‪ o‬ﻭ‪ s‬ﻭ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ ،g‬ﻳﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(Y) M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ ،0‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (Y) M‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﹰ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ؛‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(Y) M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 171
‫❚❚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ"‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ "ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﺀ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫‪ A‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ‪ 0.6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻘﺮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ i-TTL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻭ ‪12800‬؛ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪،12800‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 173
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻜﺎﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ )ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪2016 RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪12800 6400 3200 1600 800 400 200 100‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.
PAGE 175
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ SCENE‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ EV -3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV +1‬ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،EV 1/3‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(Y) M‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .
PAGE 176
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ،±0.0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Y) M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(Y) M‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .±0.0‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،SCENE‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،SCENE‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪:FV‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻷﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 178
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(M‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﹸﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻧﺒﻀﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ (e) FV‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.
PAGE 179
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ (319 0) ML-L3‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪.(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (ML-L3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 181
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (4 ،2 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .ML-L3‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 182
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪،(146 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Y) M‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(M‬‬ ‫)‪ .(36 0‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ML-L3‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .
PAGE 183
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c5‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (279 0 ،(ML-L3‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟـ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ ،(ML-L3‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ (194 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WR-1‬ﻭ‪/WR-R10‬‬ ‫‪ (319 0) WR-T10‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ‪ WR-1‬ﻭ ‪ WR-T10‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪WR-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-1‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-1‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 186
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ T/X‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪38‬؛ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(83‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 187
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (107 0) AE-L/AF-L A‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV ±3‬ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ EV 1/3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪ .(109 0‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 188
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(166‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ )‪.(379 0‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪164‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ui‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ "ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ"‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ r‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ (273 0‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬؛ ‪ ،(288 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪) g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ؛ ‪ (288 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪) g3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ؛‬ ‫‪ (288 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪178 0‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .(i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ×‪ (18×12) 1.3‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ (274 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.
PAGE 193
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ (288 0 ،‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،1‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺺ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 194
‫‪HDMI A‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI-CEC‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟـ ‪< HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(292 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪(288 0 ،‬ﻭﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (319 ،160 0‬ﻭﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (319 0‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪ j‬ﻭ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ SCENE‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(273 0‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.168‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 196
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪172‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 7‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪59‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 197
‫• ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) M‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺾ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 198
‫❚❚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺾ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺾ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.
PAGE 199
‫‪ A‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)‪ .(273 ،166 0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪ ،24p‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 200
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ .(267 0‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Y) M‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ .(229 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪/(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 179‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ (S) W‬ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻪ‪.
PAGE 203
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻬﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(229 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 204
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ )ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ (x‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 206
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪) J‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(1‬ﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬؛ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،177‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 208
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ )‪ (77 0‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻳﻨﻘﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪6 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪52 ................................
PAGE 210
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪17 16 15 14‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪17 112.............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪115....‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫)‪19 142.......................................................(HDR‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫)‪142.......................................................
PAGE 211
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪39 38‬‬ ‫‪ 26‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ 35 252.................................Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪100..............................ISO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪293...............................Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪100......................................... ISO‬‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪228.................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪103.................‬‬ ‫‪ 36‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪27 ...
PAGE 212
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .(279 0 ،‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.(281 0 ،‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪") Y‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ .
PAGE 213
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .i‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪) i‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪190‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(73 0) (18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪) i‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،C‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(73 0) (18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(77 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(81 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(168 0) (18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )‪.(166 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(166 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 217
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ(‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 219
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ‪.HDR‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪151‬‬ ‫‪109‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻭ‪ k‬ﻭ‪ p‬ﻭ‪ n‬ﻭ‪ w‬ﻭ‪g‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪،145‬‬ ‫‪147‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻭ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫‪153‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪NEF (RAW) +‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 221
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،(ADL‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ "ﻳﺼﺤﺢ" ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 222
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،BKT‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪0.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪BKT‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪) v :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪) w ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ‪) x‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.
PAGE 223
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ BKT‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪BKT‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ( /3) 0.3‬ﻭ ‪ ( /3) 0.7‬ﻭ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ .EV 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ EV (1/3) 0.3‬ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 224
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(109‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪3 :‬؛ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪0.
PAGE 225
‫❚❚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ BKT‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ ،(194 0‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ »‪ «-/-‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 226
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،(P‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،(S‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 227
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،BKT‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪WB‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪BKT‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ D‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ؛ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ y‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 228
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،BKT‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪) 3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 15‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ(‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ )‪.(114 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪BKT‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 229
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 230
‫❚❚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ BKT‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ ،(194 0‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ »‪ «-/-‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 231
‫❚❚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.139‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e6‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،BKT‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 232
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ )ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ )ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 233
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪3 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 234
‫❚❚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ BKT‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ ،(194 0‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ »‪ «-/-‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 235
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻴﻦ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 236
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 237
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/2‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ 1/3‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ(‪.
PAGE 238
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(66 0‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .
PAGE 239
‫❚❚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﻌﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ .
PAGE 240
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﻭ ‪ MUP‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 242
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 243
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ×‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) S‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.(280 0 ،‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 244
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 245
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 246
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ‪ AF-S‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪) AF-A‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 247
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 248
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 249
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .CPU‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪:CPU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 250
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪:CPU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 251
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪) GP-1/GP-1A GPS‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (2 0‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،GP-1/GP-1A‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻃﻔﺄ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪GP-1/GP-1A‬؛ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.GP-1/GP-1A‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫• ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪.
PAGE 252
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ )‪(UTC‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ GPS‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ‪ UTC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪:o‬‬ ‫• ‪) o‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ‪ .GP-1/GP-1A‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫)‪.(241 0‬‬ ‫• ‪) o‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‪ :‬ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ‪ GP-1/GP-1A‬ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 253
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .K‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 4 ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪.(267 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ ،(267 0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 255
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ" ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/ K‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ ،(243 0‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )‪ (246 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪.(245 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 256
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪72‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪J/(S) W‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 257
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪ (294 0‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ" ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ RGB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪ .(266 0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GP-1/GP-1A‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 259
‫❚❚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12 34‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪9 8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪245...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪294.........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪263........................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪89 ............................ 2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪33 ...................................................
PAGE 260
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪268........................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫*‬ ‫* ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 261
‫❚❚ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪268........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪111.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪117.................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪114..........‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪120.............................‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 262
‫‪ A‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(T) X‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .
PAGE 263
‫❚❚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪105........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪56 ،53 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪8 56 ،54 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪9 6 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪99 ......................................... 1 ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪10 109.............
PAGE 264
‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ 19 271..........‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪271...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪294.........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ 21 271.....................................................‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪291.....................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting 17‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪139..................................‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪141........................................
PAGE 265
‫❚❚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ * )‪(227 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ )‪(UTC‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 266
‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪17 18 19 20 21‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8 29‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪26 25 24‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪1 2 345‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15 141312 11 10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪263........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪245...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ‪294.........................................
PAGE 267
‫ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪X (T‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪/(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ (T) X‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪) ×38‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ (DX/16 × 24‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) ×28‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) ×19‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 268
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/ K‬‬ ‫‪244‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 269
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ (U) L‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪ .(289 0‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 270
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 271
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(232 0) (Q) O‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 272
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )‪.(249 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪ .(266 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 273
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .M‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ؛ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 274
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ )ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ( ﻳﺸﻐﹼﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫)‪.(263 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wireless Mobile Utility‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ "‪ ."Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 275
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.iOS‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻭ ‪ :iOS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪SSID‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 276
‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Wireless Mobile Utility‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 277
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺫﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 278
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ :Android‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪NFC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) NFC‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ (N-Mark) N‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ NFC‬ﻭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.
PAGE 279
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺫﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 280
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ :Android‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ WPS‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺯﺭ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﺯﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺯﺭ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ WPS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪WPS button connection‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WPS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 281
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،(256 0) WPS‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ؛ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wireless Mobile Utility‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ c‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Wireless Mobile Utility‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Wireless Mobile Adapter settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ(‪.
PAGE 282
.(‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬/‫)ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬Authentication/encryption ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ 3 .WPA2-PSK-AES ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ .(‫ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬OK ‫ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬WPA2-PSK-AES ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ 4 .
PAGE 283
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 63‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ .b‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Current settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Wireless Mobile Adapter settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ(‪.
PAGE 284
iOS ‫❚❚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ .Wireless Mobile Utility ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬c ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .Wireless Mobile Utility ‫ﻟـ‬ 1 .(WMA ‫ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬WMA settings ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ 2 .
PAGE 285
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.WPA2-PSK-AES‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.WPA2-PSK-AES‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) WMA settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (WMA‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.WMA‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Password‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) WMA settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(WMA‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 63‬ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 286
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi D‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ xx‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ xxi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 287
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 288
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ &‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 289
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪ (251 0‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) View photos‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .Wireless Mobile Utility‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 290
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪D7200‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫‪266‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 291
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؟‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 292
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪ RAW‬ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ JPEG - 1‬ﻓﺘﺢ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪268‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 293
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ )‪.(81 0‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪((24×16) DX‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(73 0‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.
PAGE 294
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ )‪.(135 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪(sRGB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 295
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ‪ E‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪) D‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .(PC‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‪.
PAGE 296
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪272‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪.
PAGE 297
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪50p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪1920×720‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫‪1920×720‬؛ ‪50p‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 298
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪274‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 299
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ P
PAGE 300
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪) 5‬ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪) 3‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﻗﺼﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪276‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 301
‫‪ a4‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ a5‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ a6‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫‪ a7‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 51‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ a8‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫‪ a9‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼ
PAGE 302
‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ(‬ ‫‪ b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫‪ 1/2‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ(‬ ‫‪ b2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1/2‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 303
‫‪ c‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ c3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ c5‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ
PAGE 304
‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ d1‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ d2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ d3‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪100-1‬‬ ‫‪ d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ d5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ d6‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ d7‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪280‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 305
‫‪ ISO d8‬ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ d10‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ d11‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪MB-D15‬‬ ‫‪) LR6‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫‪) HR6‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪(Ni-MH AA‬‬ ‫‪) FR6‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫‪ d12‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪MB-D15‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ S‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 306
‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/160‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/125‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/100‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/80‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 307
‫‪ e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪TTL‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ e3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪TTL‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ e4‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 308
‫‪ e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ e6‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪WB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫‪ e7‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪ < MTR‬ﺗﺤﺖ < ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ < ‪ < MTR‬ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪ f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f1‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪284‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪(311 ،144 0) CLS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ Pv‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ
PAGE 309
‫‪ f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،Pv‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ‪ AE-L/AF-L A‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.
PAGE 310
‫‪ f7‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ f8‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ f9‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f10‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪4 MB-D15‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪286‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.
PAGE 311
‫‪ f11‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (WR) Fn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬ ‫)‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪ Pv‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 312
‫‪ g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ g1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ g3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ g4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪ Pv‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪ AE-L/AF-L A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 313
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪U1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪+5 - -5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪.
PAGE 314
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪(0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.357‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪290‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ )‪.
PAGE 315
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ MB-D15‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 316
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪NFC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪292‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .
PAGE 317
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ftp‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺇﺛﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.(319 0) UT-1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 318
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )‪.(298 0‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ )ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.
PAGE 319
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫)‪.(302 0‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺼﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧ ﹸﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟ ﹸﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5°‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪.0.25°‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 320
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺩﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .
PAGE 321
‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 322
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ؛ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫‪ (S) W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫‪ (T) X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.
PAGE 323
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪81 ،77 0‬؛ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ .‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ )‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 324
‫‪300‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،J‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 0.1‬ﻭ ‪ .2.0‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪1.0‬؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪0.5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪ 2.0‬ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.
PAGE 325
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .
PAGE 326
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪302‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(T) X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 327
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪-2‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 328
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪AF‬‬ ‫‪5‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ AF NIKKOR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪AF-S، AF-I NIKKOR‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪PC-E‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪PC Micro 85‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪f/2.
PAGE 329
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪AF‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪NIKKOR AI‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪-AI‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪E‬‬ ‫‪Medical-NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪120 f/4‬‬ ‫‪Reflex-NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪PC-NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪AI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪PB-6‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪PK-‬‬ ‫‪ 11A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺃﻭ ‪13‬؛ ‪(PN-11‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ
PAGE 330
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ AF-S‬ﻭ ‪ AF-I‬ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ .(307 0‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.307‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪AF 80-200‬‬ ‫‪ f/2.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF 35-70 f/2.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪> AF 28-85 f/3.5-4.5‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ< ﺃﻭ ‪AF 28-85 f/3.5-4.
PAGE 331
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ‪ E‬ﻭ‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) CPU‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ‪ E‬ﻭ‪ ،(D‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .IX-NIKKOR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪ ،CPU‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ‪ E‬ﻭ‪ D‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪ E‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 332
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ (225 0) CPU‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 333
‫‪ A‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3.0-0.5‬ﻣﺘﺮ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ 200-18‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://nikonimglib.
PAGE 334
‫‪ A‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 24 × 36‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7200‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ 15.6 × 23.5 ،‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) D7200‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ×‪ ،(18×12) 1.3‬ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ×‪.(1.
PAGE 335
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(Speedlights‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﹰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 336
‫• ‪ SU-800‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlight‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،CLS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SU-800‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-910‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-900‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-700‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-600‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-R200‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ SU-800‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺴﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 337
‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-700‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-600‬‬ ‫— —‬ ‫— —‬ ‫— —‬ ‫‪— z4‬‬ ‫— —‬ ‫‪z z4‬‬ ‫‪— z4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪z4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪z4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-500‬‬ ‫‪z2‬‬ ‫‪z z2 z‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪z z‬‬ ‫‪SB-400‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z z z‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪z z‬‬ ‫‪SB-300‬‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ AA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ
PAGE 338
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪SB-700‬‬ ‫‪SB-600‬‬ ‫‪SB-500‬‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫‪SB-400‬‬ ‫‪SB-R200‬‬ ‫‪SB-300‬‬ ‫‪SB-910، SB-900،‬‬ ‫‪SB-800‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪— — z z z z z‬‬ ‫‪z z z z z z z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z z‬‬ ‫— ‪—
PAGE 339
‫❚❚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 340
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،CLS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-80DX‬ﻭ‪ SB-28DX‬ﻭ‪ SB-50DX‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7200‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ "ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪SLR‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ j‬ﻭ‪ %‬ﻭ‪ ،u‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 341
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ ‪ SB-900‬ﻭ ‪ SB-800‬ﻭ ‪ SB-700‬ﻭ ‪ SB-600‬ﻭ ‪ SB-500‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-400‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ ‪ SB-900‬ﻭ ‪ SB-800‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-700‬ﻭ ‪ SB-600‬ﻭ ‪ SU-800‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ‪ :SB-900‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ 135-17 AF‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 342
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(282 0‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AA‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ )‪TTL (A‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪(GN‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 343
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7200‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 344
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 345
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ"‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 346
‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﻭﻗﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 347
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ )‪ (324 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 348
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(321 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺼﺢ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪324‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 349
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻒ ﺷﺮﻃﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 350
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﻴﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺳﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 351
‫‪ D‬ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺯﻳﺖ ﺗﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ( ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .
PAGE 352
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 353
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .
PAGE 354
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،99.99%‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 0.01%‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫)ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .
PAGE 355
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ‪° 5‬ﻡ ‪° -35‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° 40‬ﻡ؛ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 356
‫• ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪.EN-EL15‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ MH-25a‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .
PAGE 357
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .
PAGE 358
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪.(29 ،22 0‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f7‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ؛ ‪ (286 0‬ﻭﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(29 0‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪.(36 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.(34 0‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ CPU‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 359
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.(89 0‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ )‪.(88 ،86 0‬‬ ‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ (229 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪.(266 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(37 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪.
PAGE 360
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪ NR‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪.
PAGE 361
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،a‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ‪.
PAGE 362
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪.(111 0‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(130 0) Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻇﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ)‪.(123 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ :‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.(127 0) D7200‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ NEF+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(77 0‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ )‪.
PAGE 363
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪.(266 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ" )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﻋﺮﻳﺾ" )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ )‪.(267 0‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )‪.(290 0‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 364
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 365
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ • .
PAGE 366
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ CPU‬ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ F H‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫• ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Nikkor‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪.IX‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪،CPU‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.
PAGE 367
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ %‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪k P‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ( )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ( ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪56 ،53‬‬ ‫‪56 ،53‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.
PAGE 368
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ S .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪379‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪،W .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .
PAGE 369
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫"ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪،W‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ(‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫" ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪،W‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪[C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 370
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪346‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻻ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 371
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 372
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ D7200‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪348‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) F‬ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DX‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ]‪ [135‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ×1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪FX‬‬ ‫‪ 24.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ 15.6 × 23.
PAGE 373
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫• )‪ 12 :NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬ ‫• ‪ :JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG-Baseline‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ،(4 : 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ،(8 : 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ (16 : 1‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(؛ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ :JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ؛ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
PAGE 374
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ BriteView‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ B‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻻﻣﻌﺔ ‪ Mark II‬ﺑﺄﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Pv‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ (M‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،AF NIKKOR‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪) D‬ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ
PAGE 375
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫)‪(ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ 30-1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،EV 1/2‬ﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪X250‬‬ ‫‪ X = 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ )ﻳﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/250‬ﻭ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪) S‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪) CL ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ(‪) CH ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ(‪) Q ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪) E ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪) MUP ،‬
PAGE 376
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ RGB‬ﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2016‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪) II‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪(D‬؛ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) II‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(؛ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75%‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 377
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ EV +5 - -5‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 1/2‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪) SCENE‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪%‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ(‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪AE-L/AF-L A‬‬ ‫‪ 25600 - ISO 100‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 378
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻭ‪ k‬ﻭ‪ p‬ﻭ‪ n‬ﻭ‪ o‬ﻭ‪ s‬ﻭ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ :g‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ :0‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 12 ،12‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﻡ‪°20 ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻡ(‬ ‫‪ :TTL‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2016‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛ ﻭﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬
PAGE 379
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ )‪ 7‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻗﻴﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ ،(K10000 - K 2500‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳ
PAGE 380
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪356‬‬ ‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪ H.264/MPEG-4‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ 1229‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪VGA‬؛ ‪= 480 × RGBW × 640‬‬ ‫‪ 1.228.
PAGE 381
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪NFC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪IEEE 802.11g ،IEEE 802.11b‬‬ ‫‪ 2462-2412‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪(11-1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 30‬ﻡ )ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪ 54‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.IEEE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 382
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL15‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MB-D15‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ EN-EL15‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ،AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،Ni-MH‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EH-5b‬؛ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EP-5B‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ‪ 1/4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪(ISO 1222‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
PAGE 383
‫❚❚ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MH-25a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240-100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.12-0.23 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 8.4‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 1.2/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪° 25‬ﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ‪° 40-‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 71 × 33.5 × 95‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ 1.
PAGE 384
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪360‬‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ DX‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G AF-S‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫‪ 105-18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 385
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-140‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ DX‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G AF-S‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫‪ 140-18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 386
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-200‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ DX‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G AF-S‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫‪ 200-18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 387
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105‬‬ ‫‪ f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬ﻭ‪ ،AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-140 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬ﻭ‪AF-S DX‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪ .NIKKOR 18-200 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.6G‬‬ ‫‪.ED VR‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 388
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 389
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 390
‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-140 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬ﻭ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-200‬‬ ‫‪ f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DX‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 391
‫❚❚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪(VR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪ ،(VR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺑﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DX‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3.5‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪ (18-200 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR‬‬ ‫‪ (18-140 f/3.5-5.
PAGE 392
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ؛ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.
PAGE 393
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 0.6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ )ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪:AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.
PAGE 394
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪:AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-140 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪/D7000/D7100/D7200‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪D100/D200/D300‬‬ ‫‪ 140-24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪D50/D80/D90‬‬ ‫‪ 140-35‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪/D5200/D5300/D5500‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪/D3300/D5000/D5100‬‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪/D3000/D3100/D3200‬‬ ‫‪ 140-35‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ /D60/D70‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪D40‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪:AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-200 f/3.5-5.
PAGE 395
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ ‪ 67‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-67‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫• ﺟﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ ‪CL-1018‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪HB-32‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )●( ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ) ( ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ q‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ● ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )—‪.(‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .
PAGE 396
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-140 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ ‪ 67‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-67‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-140‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.
PAGE 397
‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-200‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ ‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-72‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫• ﺟﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ ‪CL-1018‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪HB-35‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )●( ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ) ( ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ q‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ● ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )—‪.
PAGE 398
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 399
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) M/A‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-200 f/3.5-5.6G ED VR II‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪:(M/A‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (365 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M/A‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 400
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪376‬‬ ‫‪ DCF‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.0‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (DCF‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Exif‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.3‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) Exif‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،2.
PAGE 401
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ IOS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Cisco Systems، Inc‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ PictBridge .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،SD-3C، LLC. HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.
PAGE 402
‫‪ A‬ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪378‬‬
PAGE 403
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 404
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪ SanDisk Extreme Pro 95‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪UHS-I SDHC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(77 0‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(81 0‬ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (73 0‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 405
‫❚❚ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ×‪(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ 1‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ 12 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ 15.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪575‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ 14 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪ 12 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪ 14 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ 18.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪449‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 13.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16.9‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 8.6‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 5.3‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.
PAGE 406
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،AA‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ؛ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 407
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪° 23‬ﻡ )‪° ±2‬ﻡ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105‬‬ ‫‪ f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪° 20‬ﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105 f/3.5-5.
PAGE 408
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪30 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪) j‬ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪30 ......................‬‬ ‫‪) SCENE‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪41 ........................................‬‬ ‫‪) EFFECTS‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ( ‪44 ....................................‬‬ ‫‪) k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪42 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪) l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪42 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪) p‬ﻃﻔﻞ( ‪42 .............................................................
PAGE 409
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪237 .....................................................................RGB‬‬ ‫‪376 ......................................................................DCF‬‬ ‫‪294 .........................................................D-Lighting‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪270 ،207 ،139........................‬‬ ‫‪376 ،267 ..........................................................DPOF‬‬ ‫‪169 ،168 ،73 .........................................(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪376 ........................................
PAGE 410
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪66 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪194 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪65 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪276 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪194 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪273 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪268 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪276 ...............................................
PAGE 411
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪88 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪90 ،87...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪90 ،86 ...........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪89 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪319 ،25 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪88 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ‪88 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪97...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪269 ،80 ................
PAGE 412
‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪278 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪116....................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪117 ،113 ،111 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪268 ،82 .................................2‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪71 ،66 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ )‪156 ....................................................((ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪70.......................................
PAGE 413
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ )‪80 ......................................NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪55 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪295 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻍ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟـﻮﻳــﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪53 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪111 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪319 ،3 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪70..................................‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪59 ،58............
PAGE 414
‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪83 .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪84 ...............‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪84 ،83........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪83 ........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪234 ،185...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪234 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪234 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪349 ،319 ،25 ،10 ............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪98 .........
PAGE 415
PAGE 416
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.